1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 22 #include <net/codel.h> 23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 24 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 25 26 /** 27 * DOC: Introduction 28 * 29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 32 * drivers. 33 */ 34 35 /** 36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 37 * 38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 43 * tasklet function. 44 * 45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 47 */ 48 49 /** 50 * DOC: Warning 51 * 52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 54 */ 55 56 /** 57 * DOC: Frame format 58 * 59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 62 * hardware. 63 * 64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 65 * 66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 68 * 69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 71 */ 72 73 /** 74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 75 * 76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 80 * 81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during 82 * suspend. 83 * 84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 85 * 86 */ 87 88 /** 89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 90 * 91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed 92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness 93 * between different stations/interfaces. 94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead 95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx(). 96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx(). 97 * 98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue 99 * driver operation. 100 * 101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 104 * 105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 107 * 108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a 109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a 110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op. 111 * 112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 116 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 117 * 118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 122 * .release_buffered_frames(). 123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 126 */ 127 128 struct device; 129 130 /** 131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 132 * 133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 135 */ 136 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 139 }; 140 141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 142 143 /** 144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 149 */ 150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 155 }; 156 157 /** 158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 159 * 160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 162 * 163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 172 */ 173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 174 u16 txop; 175 u16 cw_min; 176 u16 cw_max; 177 u8 aifs; 178 bool acm; 179 bool uapsd; 180 bool mu_edca; 181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 182 }; 183 184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 189 }; 190 191 /** 192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 199 */ 200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 206 }; 207 208 /** 209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 210 * 211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 213 * 214 * @def: the channel definition 215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 224 */ 225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 228 229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 230 231 bool radar_enabled; 232 233 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 234 }; 235 236 /** 237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 240 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 248 * for changes/removal.) 249 */ 250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 253 }; 254 255 /** 256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 257 * 258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 261 * done. 262 * 263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 264 * @link_id: the link ID that's switching 265 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 266 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 267 */ 268 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 269 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 270 unsigned int link_id; 271 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 272 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 273 }; 274 275 /** 276 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 277 * 278 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 279 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 280 * 281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 282 * also implies a change in the AID. 283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 284 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 286 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 288 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 290 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 292 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 293 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 294 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 295 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 296 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 297 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 298 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 299 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 300 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 304 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 306 * changed 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 308 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 309 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 310 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 311 * context had been assigned. 312 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 313 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 315 * keep alive) changed. 316 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 317 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 318 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 322 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 323 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 324 * status changed. 325 * 326 */ 327 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 328 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 329 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 330 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 331 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 332 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 333 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 334 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 335 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 336 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 337 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 338 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 339 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 340 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 341 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 342 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 343 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 344 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 345 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 346 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 347 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 348 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 349 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 350 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 351 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 352 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 353 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 354 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 355 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 356 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 357 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 358 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 359 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31, 360 361 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 362 }; 363 364 /* 365 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 366 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 367 * filtering will be disabled. 368 */ 369 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 370 371 /** 372 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 373 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 374 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 375 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 376 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 377 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 378 * once each time the timeout triggers. 379 */ 380 enum ieee80211_event_type { 381 RSSI_EVENT, 382 MLME_EVENT, 383 BAR_RX_EVENT, 384 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 385 }; 386 387 /** 388 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 389 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 390 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 391 */ 392 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 393 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 394 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 395 }; 396 397 /** 398 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 399 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 400 */ 401 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 402 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 403 }; 404 405 /** 406 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 407 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 408 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 409 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 410 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 411 */ 412 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 413 AUTH_EVENT, 414 ASSOC_EVENT, 415 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 416 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 417 }; 418 419 /** 420 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 421 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 422 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 423 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 424 */ 425 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 426 MLME_SUCCESS, 427 MLME_DENIED, 428 MLME_TIMEOUT, 429 }; 430 431 /** 432 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 433 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 434 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 435 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 436 */ 437 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 438 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 439 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 440 u16 reason; 441 }; 442 443 /** 444 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 445 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 446 * @tid: the tid 447 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 448 */ 449 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 450 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 451 u16 tid; 452 u16 ssn; 453 }; 454 455 /** 456 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 457 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 458 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 459 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 460 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 461 * @u:union holding the fields above 462 */ 463 struct ieee80211_event { 464 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 465 union { 466 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 467 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 468 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 469 } u; 470 }; 471 472 /** 473 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 474 * 475 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 476 * 477 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 478 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 479 */ 480 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 481 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 482 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 483 }; 484 485 /** 486 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 487 * 488 * @lci: LCI subelement content 489 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 490 * @lci_len: LCI data length 491 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 492 */ 493 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 494 const u8 *lci; 495 const u8 *civicloc; 496 size_t lci_len; 497 size_t civicloc_len; 498 }; 499 500 /** 501 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 502 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 503 * 504 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 505 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 506 */ 507 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 508 u32 min_interval; 509 u32 max_interval; 510 }; 511 512 /** 513 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 514 * 515 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 516 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 517 * 518 * @addr: (link) address used locally 519 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 520 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 521 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 522 * ACK, BACK or both 523 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 524 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 525 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 526 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 527 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 528 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 529 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 530 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 531 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 532 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 533 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 534 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 535 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 536 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 537 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 538 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 539 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 540 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 541 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 542 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 543 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 544 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 545 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 546 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 547 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 548 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 549 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 550 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 551 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 552 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 553 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 554 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 555 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 556 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 557 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 558 * the current band. 559 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 560 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 561 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 562 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 563 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 564 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 565 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 566 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 567 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 568 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 569 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 570 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 571 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 572 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 573 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 574 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 575 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 576 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 577 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 578 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 579 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 580 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 581 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 582 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 583 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 584 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 585 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 586 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 587 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 588 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 589 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 590 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 591 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 592 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 593 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 594 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 595 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 596 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 597 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 598 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 599 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 600 * station. 601 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 602 * responder functionality. 603 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 604 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 605 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 606 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 607 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 608 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 609 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 610 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 611 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 612 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 613 * connected to (STA) 614 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 615 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 616 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 617 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 618 * interval. 619 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 620 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 621 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 622 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS. 623 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env. 624 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 625 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 626 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is 627 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 628 * for read access. 629 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 630 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 631 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 632 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 633 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 634 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 635 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is 636 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 637 * for read access. 638 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 639 */ 640 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 641 const u8 *bssid; 642 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 643 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 644 bool uora_exists; 645 u8 uora_ocw_range; 646 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 647 bool he_support; 648 bool twt_requester; 649 bool twt_responder; 650 bool twt_protected; 651 bool twt_broadcast; 652 /* erp related data */ 653 bool use_cts_prot; 654 bool use_short_preamble; 655 bool use_short_slot; 656 bool enable_beacon; 657 u8 dtim_period; 658 u16 beacon_int; 659 u16 assoc_capability; 660 u64 sync_tsf; 661 u32 sync_device_ts; 662 u8 sync_dtim_count; 663 u32 basic_rates; 664 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 665 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 666 u16 ht_operation_mode; 667 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 668 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 669 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 670 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 671 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 672 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 673 bool qos; 674 bool ps; 675 bool hidden_ssid; 676 int txpower; 677 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 678 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 679 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 680 u16 max_idle_period; 681 bool protected_keep_alive; 682 bool ftm_responder; 683 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 684 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 685 bool nontransmitted; 686 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 687 u8 bssid_index; 688 u8 bssid_indicator; 689 bool ema_ap; 690 u8 profile_periodicity; 691 struct { 692 u32 params; 693 u16 nss_set; 694 } he_oper; 695 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 696 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 697 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 698 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 699 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 700 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 701 struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT]; 702 u8 tx_pwr_env_num; 703 u8 pwr_reduction; 704 bool eht_support; 705 706 bool csa_active; 707 bool mu_mimo_owner; 708 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 709 710 bool color_change_active; 711 u8 color_change_color; 712 }; 713 714 /** 715 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 716 * 717 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 718 * 719 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 720 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 721 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 722 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 723 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 724 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 725 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 726 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 727 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 728 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 729 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 730 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 731 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 732 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 733 * station 734 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 735 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 736 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 737 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 738 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 739 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 740 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 741 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 742 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 743 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 744 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 745 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 746 * hardware queue. 747 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 748 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 749 * is for the whole aggregation. 750 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 751 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 752 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 753 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 754 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 755 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 756 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 757 * off-channel operation. 758 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 759 * (header conversion) 760 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 761 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 762 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 763 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 764 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 765 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 766 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 767 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 768 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 769 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 770 * queue gets full. 771 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 772 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 773 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 774 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 775 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 776 * should kick the MLME state machine. 777 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 778 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 779 * status to user space) 780 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 781 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 782 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 783 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 784 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 785 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 786 * handled properly by the device. 787 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 788 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 789 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 790 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 791 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 792 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 793 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 794 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 795 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 796 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 797 * PS-Poll responses. 798 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 799 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 800 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 801 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 802 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 803 * monitor injection). 804 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 805 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 806 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 807 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 808 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 809 * 810 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 811 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 812 */ 813 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 814 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 815 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 816 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 817 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 818 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 819 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 820 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 821 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 822 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 823 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 824 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 825 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 826 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 827 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 828 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 829 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 830 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 831 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 833 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 834 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 835 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 836 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 837 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 838 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 839 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 840 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 841 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 842 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 843 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 844 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 845 }; 846 847 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 848 849 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 850 851 /** 852 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 853 * 854 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 855 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 856 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 857 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 858 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 859 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 860 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 861 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 862 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 863 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 864 * it can be sent out. 865 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 866 * has already been assigned to this frame. 867 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 868 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 869 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 870 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 871 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 872 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 873 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. 874 * 875 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 876 */ 877 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 878 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 879 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 880 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 881 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 882 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 883 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 884 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 885 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 886 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 887 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 888 }; 889 890 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 891 892 /** 893 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 894 * 895 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 896 * 897 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 898 */ 899 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 900 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 901 }; 902 903 /* 904 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 905 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 906 */ 907 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 908 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 909 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 910 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 911 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 912 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 913 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 914 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 915 916 /** 917 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 918 * Rate Control algorithm. 919 * 920 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 921 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 922 * 923 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 924 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 925 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 926 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 927 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 928 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 929 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 930 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 931 * Greenfield mode. 932 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 933 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 934 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 935 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 936 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 937 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 938 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 939 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 940 */ 941 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 942 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 943 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 944 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 945 946 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 947 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 948 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 949 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 950 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 951 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 952 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 953 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 954 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 955 }; 956 957 958 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 959 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 960 961 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 962 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 963 964 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 965 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 966 967 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 968 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 969 970 /** 971 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 972 * 973 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 974 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 975 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 976 * 977 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 978 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 979 * 980 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 981 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 982 * 983 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 984 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 985 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 986 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 987 * information:: 988 * 989 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 990 * 991 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 992 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 993 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 994 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 995 * information should then contain:: 996 * 997 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 998 * 999 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1000 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1001 */ 1002 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1003 s8 idx; 1004 u16 count:5, 1005 flags:11; 1006 } __packed; 1007 1008 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1009 1010 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1011 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1012 { 1013 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1014 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1015 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1016 } 1017 1018 static inline u8 1019 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1020 { 1021 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1022 } 1023 1024 static inline u8 1025 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1026 { 1027 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1028 } 1029 1030 /** 1031 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1032 * 1033 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1034 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1035 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1036 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1037 * 1038 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1039 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1040 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1041 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1042 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1043 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally 1044 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1045 * @control: union part for control data 1046 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1047 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1048 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1049 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1050 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1051 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1052 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1053 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1054 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1055 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1056 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1057 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1058 * @pad: padding 1059 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1060 * @status: union part for status data 1061 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1062 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1063 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1064 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1065 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1066 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1067 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1068 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1069 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1070 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1071 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1072 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1073 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1074 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1075 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1076 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1077 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1078 */ 1079 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1080 /* common information */ 1081 u32 flags; 1082 u32 band:3, 1083 ack_frame_id:13, 1084 hw_queue:4, 1085 tx_time_est:10; 1086 /* 2 free bits */ 1087 1088 union { 1089 struct { 1090 union { 1091 /* rate control */ 1092 struct { 1093 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1094 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1095 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1096 u8 use_rts:1; 1097 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1098 u8 short_preamble:1; 1099 u8 skip_table:1; 1100 /* 2 bytes free */ 1101 }; 1102 /* only needed before rate control */ 1103 unsigned long jiffies; 1104 }; 1105 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1106 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1107 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1108 u32 flags; 1109 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1110 } control; 1111 struct { 1112 u64 cookie; 1113 } ack; 1114 struct { 1115 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1116 s32 ack_signal; 1117 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1118 u8 ampdu_len; 1119 u8 antenna; 1120 u16 tx_time; 1121 u8 flags; 1122 void *status_driver_data[18 / sizeof(void *)]; 1123 } status; 1124 struct { 1125 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1126 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1127 u8 pad[4]; 1128 1129 void *rate_driver_data[ 1130 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1131 }; 1132 void *driver_data[ 1133 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1134 }; 1135 }; 1136 1137 static inline u16 1138 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1139 { 1140 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1141 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1142 */ 1143 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1144 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1145 } 1146 1147 static inline u16 1148 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1149 { 1150 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1151 } 1152 1153 /*** 1154 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1155 * 1156 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1157 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1158 * 1159 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1160 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1161 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1162 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1163 * that was used when sending the packet. 1164 */ 1165 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1166 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1167 u8 try_count; 1168 u8 tx_power_idx; 1169 }; 1170 1171 /** 1172 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1173 * 1174 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1175 * @info: Basic tx status information 1176 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1177 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1178 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1179 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1180 */ 1181 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1182 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1183 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1184 struct sk_buff *skb; 1185 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1186 u8 n_rates; 1187 1188 struct list_head *free_list; 1189 }; 1190 1191 /** 1192 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1193 * 1194 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1195 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1196 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1197 * 1198 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1199 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1200 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1201 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1202 */ 1203 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1204 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1205 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1206 const u8 *common_ies; 1207 size_t common_ie_len; 1208 }; 1209 1210 1211 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1212 { 1213 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1214 } 1215 1216 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1217 { 1218 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1219 } 1220 1221 /** 1222 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1223 * 1224 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1225 * 1226 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1227 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1228 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1229 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1230 * 1231 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1232 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1233 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1234 */ 1235 static inline void 1236 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1237 { 1238 int i; 1239 1240 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1241 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1242 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1243 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1244 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1245 /* clear the rate counts */ 1246 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1247 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1248 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1249 } 1250 1251 1252 /** 1253 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1254 * 1255 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1256 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1257 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1258 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1259 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1260 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1261 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1262 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1263 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1264 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1265 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1266 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1267 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1268 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1269 * de-duplication by itself. 1270 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1271 * the frame. 1272 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1273 * the frame. 1274 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1275 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1276 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1277 * merging. 1278 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1279 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1280 * (including FCS) was received. 1281 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1282 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1283 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1284 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1285 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1286 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1287 * each A-MPDU 1288 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1289 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1290 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1291 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1292 * on this subframe 1293 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1294 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1295 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1296 * done by the hardware 1297 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1298 * processing it in any regular way. 1299 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1300 * them for sniffing purposes. 1301 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1302 * monitor interfaces. 1303 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1304 * them for sniffing purposes. 1305 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1306 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1307 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1308 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1309 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1310 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1311 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1312 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1313 * interleaved with other frames. 1314 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific 1315 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by 1316 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap. 1317 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1318 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1319 * the first subframe. 1320 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1321 * be done in the hardware. 1322 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1323 * frame 1324 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1325 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1326 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1327 * 1328 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1329 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1330 * - DATA3_CODING 1331 * - DATA5_GI 1332 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1333 * - DATA6_NSTS 1334 * - DATA3_STBC 1335 * 1336 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1337 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1338 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1339 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1340 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1341 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1342 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1343 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1344 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1345 * hardware or driver) 1346 */ 1347 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1348 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1349 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1350 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1351 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1352 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1353 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1354 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1355 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1356 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1357 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1358 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1359 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1360 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1361 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1362 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1363 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1364 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1365 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1366 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1367 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1368 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20), 1369 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1370 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1371 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1372 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1373 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1374 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1375 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1376 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1377 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1378 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1379 }; 1380 1381 /** 1382 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1383 * 1384 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1385 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1386 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1387 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1388 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1389 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1390 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1391 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1392 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1393 */ 1394 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1395 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1396 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1397 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1398 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1399 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1400 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1401 }; 1402 1403 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1404 1405 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1406 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1407 RX_ENC_HT, 1408 RX_ENC_VHT, 1409 RX_ENC_HE, 1410 }; 1411 1412 /** 1413 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1414 * 1415 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1416 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1417 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1418 * 1419 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1420 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1421 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1422 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1423 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1424 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1425 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1426 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1427 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1428 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1429 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1430 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1431 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1432 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1433 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1434 * values were filled. 1435 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1436 * support dB or unspecified units) 1437 * @antenna: antenna used 1438 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1439 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1440 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only) 1441 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1442 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1443 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1444 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1445 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1446 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1447 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1448 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1449 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1450 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1451 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1452 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1453 */ 1454 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1455 u64 mactime; 1456 u64 boottime_ns; 1457 u32 device_timestamp; 1458 u32 ampdu_reference; 1459 u32 flag; 1460 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1461 u8 enc_flags; 1462 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3; 1463 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1; 1464 u8 rate_idx; 1465 u8 nss; 1466 u8 rx_flags; 1467 u8 band; 1468 u8 antenna; 1469 s8 signal; 1470 u8 chains; 1471 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1472 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1473 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1474 }; 1475 1476 static inline u32 1477 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1478 { 1479 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1480 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1481 } 1482 1483 /** 1484 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information 1485 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace 1486 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more 1487 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that) 1488 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed 1489 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace 1490 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment) 1491 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1! 1492 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI 1493 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace 1494 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done 1495 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the 1496 * @data field. 1497 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that 1498 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd 1499 * length 1500 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data 1501 * 1502 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before 1503 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns 1504 * data. 1505 */ 1506 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap { 1507 u32 present; 1508 u8 align; 1509 u8 oui[3]; 1510 u8 subns; 1511 u8 pad; 1512 u16 len; 1513 u8 data[]; 1514 } __packed; 1515 1516 /** 1517 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1518 * 1519 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1520 * 1521 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1522 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1523 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1524 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1525 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1526 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1527 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1528 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1529 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1530 * for more. 1531 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1532 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1533 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1534 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1535 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1536 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1537 * operating channel. 1538 */ 1539 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1540 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1541 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1542 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1543 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1544 }; 1545 1546 1547 /** 1548 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1549 * 1550 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1551 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1552 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1553 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1554 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1555 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1556 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1557 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1558 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1559 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1560 */ 1561 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1562 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1563 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1564 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1565 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1566 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1567 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1568 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1569 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1570 }; 1571 1572 /** 1573 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1574 * 1575 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1576 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1577 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1578 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1579 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1580 */ 1581 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1582 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1583 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1584 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1585 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1586 1587 /* keep last */ 1588 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1589 }; 1590 1591 /** 1592 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1593 * 1594 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1595 * 1596 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1597 * 1598 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1599 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1600 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1601 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1602 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1603 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1604 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1605 * 1606 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1607 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1608 * 1609 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1610 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1611 * 1612 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1613 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1614 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1615 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1616 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1617 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1618 * 1619 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1620 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1621 * configured for an HT channel. 1622 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1623 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1624 */ 1625 struct ieee80211_conf { 1626 u32 flags; 1627 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1628 1629 u16 listen_interval; 1630 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1631 1632 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1633 1634 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1635 bool radar_enabled; 1636 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1637 }; 1638 1639 /** 1640 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1641 * 1642 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1643 * operation. 1644 * 1645 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1646 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1647 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1648 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1649 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1650 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1651 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1652 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1653 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1654 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1655 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1656 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1657 * channel, expressed in TU. 1658 */ 1659 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1660 u64 timestamp; 1661 u32 device_timestamp; 1662 bool block_tx; 1663 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1664 u8 count; 1665 u32 delay; 1666 }; 1667 1668 /** 1669 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1670 * 1671 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1672 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1673 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1674 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1675 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1676 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1677 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1678 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1679 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1680 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1681 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1682 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1683 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1684 */ 1685 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1686 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1687 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1688 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1689 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1690 }; 1691 1692 1693 /** 1694 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1695 * 1696 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1697 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1698 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1699 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1700 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 1701 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 1702 * mac80211. 1703 */ 1704 1705 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1706 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1707 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1708 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 1709 }; 1710 1711 /** 1712 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 1713 * @assoc: association status 1714 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 1715 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 1716 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 1717 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 1718 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 1719 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 1720 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 1721 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 1722 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 1723 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 1724 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 1725 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 1726 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 1727 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 1728 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 1729 * your driver/device needs to do. 1730 */ 1731 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 1732 /* association related data */ 1733 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 1734 bool ibss_creator; 1735 u16 aid; 1736 1737 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 1738 int arp_addr_cnt; 1739 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 1740 size_t ssid_len; 1741 bool s1g; 1742 bool idle; 1743 }; 1744 1745 /** 1746 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1747 * 1748 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1749 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1750 * 1751 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1752 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 1753 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1754 * or the BSS we're associated to 1755 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 1756 * indexed by link ID 1757 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1758 * @addr: address of this interface 1759 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1760 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1761 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1762 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1763 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1764 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1765 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 1766 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 1767 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 1768 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 1769 * restrictions. 1770 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1771 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1772 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1773 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1774 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1775 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1776 * interface. 1777 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 1778 * for this interface. 1779 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1780 * sizeof(void \*). 1781 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction) 1782 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped, 1783 * protected by fq->lock. 1784 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 1785 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 1786 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled. 1787 */ 1788 struct ieee80211_vif { 1789 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1790 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 1791 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1792 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 1793 u16 valid_links; 1794 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1795 bool p2p; 1796 1797 u8 cab_queue; 1798 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1799 1800 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1801 1802 u32 driver_flags; 1803 u32 offload_flags; 1804 1805 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1806 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1807 #endif 1808 1809 bool probe_req_reg; 1810 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 1811 1812 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1813 1814 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif; 1815 1816 /* must be last */ 1817 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1818 }; 1819 1820 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1821 { 1822 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1823 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1824 #endif 1825 return false; 1826 } 1827 1828 /** 1829 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1830 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1831 * 1832 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1833 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1834 * 1835 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1836 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1837 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1838 */ 1839 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1840 1841 /** 1842 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1843 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1844 * 1845 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1846 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1847 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 1848 */ 1849 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1850 1851 /** 1852 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1853 * 1854 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 1855 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 1856 * 1857 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 1858 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 1859 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 1860 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 1861 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 1862 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 1863 * generation in software. 1864 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 1865 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 1866 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 1867 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 1868 * (MFP) to be done in software. 1869 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 1870 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 1871 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 1872 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 1873 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 1874 * MIC. 1875 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 1876 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 1877 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 1878 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 1879 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 1880 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 1881 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 1882 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 1883 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 1884 * only for management frames (MFP). 1885 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 1886 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 1887 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 1888 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 1889 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 1890 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 1891 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 1892 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 1893 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 1894 * generation only 1895 */ 1896 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 1897 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 1898 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 1899 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 1900 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 1901 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 1902 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 1903 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 1904 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 1905 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 1906 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 1907 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 1908 }; 1909 1910 /** 1911 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 1912 * 1913 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 1914 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 1915 * 1916 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 1917 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 1918 * encrypted in hardware. 1919 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 1920 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 1921 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 1922 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 1923 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 1924 * @keylen: key material length 1925 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 1926 * data block: 1927 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 1928 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 1929 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 1930 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 1931 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 1932 */ 1933 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 1934 atomic64_t tx_pn; 1935 u32 cipher; 1936 u8 icv_len; 1937 u8 iv_len; 1938 u8 hw_key_idx; 1939 s8 keyidx; 1940 u16 flags; 1941 u8 keylen; 1942 u8 key[]; 1943 }; 1944 1945 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 1946 1947 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 1948 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 1949 1950 /** 1951 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 1952 * 1953 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 1954 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1955 * reverse order than in packet) 1956 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1957 * reverse order than in packet) 1958 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1959 * reverse order than in packet) 1960 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 1961 * reverse order than in packet) 1962 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 1963 */ 1964 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 1965 union { 1966 struct { 1967 u32 iv32; 1968 u16 iv16; 1969 } tkip; 1970 struct { 1971 u8 pn[6]; 1972 } ccmp; 1973 struct { 1974 u8 pn[6]; 1975 } aes_cmac; 1976 struct { 1977 u8 pn[6]; 1978 } aes_gmac; 1979 struct { 1980 u8 pn[6]; 1981 } gcmp; 1982 struct { 1983 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 1984 u8 seq_len; 1985 } hw; 1986 }; 1987 }; 1988 1989 /** 1990 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 1991 * 1992 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 1993 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 1994 * 1995 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 1996 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 1997 */ 1998 enum set_key_cmd { 1999 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2000 }; 2001 2002 /** 2003 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2004 * 2005 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2006 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2007 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2008 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2009 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2010 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2011 */ 2012 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2013 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2014 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2015 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2016 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2017 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2018 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2019 }; 2020 2021 /** 2022 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2023 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2024 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2025 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2026 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2027 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2028 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2029 * 2030 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2031 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2032 */ 2033 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2034 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2035 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2036 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2037 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2038 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2039 }; 2040 2041 /** 2042 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2043 * 2044 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2045 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2046 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2047 */ 2048 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2049 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2050 struct { 2051 s8 idx; 2052 u8 count; 2053 u8 count_cts; 2054 u8 count_rts; 2055 u16 flags; 2056 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2057 }; 2058 2059 /** 2060 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2061 * 2062 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2063 * 2064 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2065 * to the STA. 2066 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2067 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2068 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2069 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2070 * per peer TPC. 2071 */ 2072 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2073 s16 power; 2074 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2075 }; 2076 2077 /** 2078 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2079 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2080 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2081 * 2082 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2083 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2084 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2085 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2086 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2087 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2088 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2089 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2090 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2091 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2092 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2093 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2094 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2095 * the station moves to associated state. 2096 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2097 * 2098 */ 2099 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2100 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2101 2102 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2103 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2104 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2105 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2106 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2107 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2108 2109 u8 rx_nss; 2110 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2111 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2112 }; 2113 2114 /** 2115 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2116 * 2117 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2118 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2119 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2120 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2121 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2122 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2123 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2124 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2125 * 2126 * @addr: MAC address 2127 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2128 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2129 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2130 * Can be modified by driver. 2131 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2132 * otherwise always false) 2133 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2134 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2135 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2136 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2137 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2138 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2139 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2140 * @rates: rate control selection table 2141 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2142 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2143 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2144 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2145 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2146 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2147 * unlimited. 2148 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2149 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2150 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2151 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that 2152 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames 2153 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2154 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2155 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2156 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2157 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2158 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2159 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2160 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2161 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2162 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2163 * by the AP. 2164 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2165 */ 2166 struct ieee80211_sta { 2167 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2168 u16 aid; 2169 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2170 bool wme; 2171 u8 uapsd_queues; 2172 u8 max_sp; 2173 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2174 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2175 bool tdls; 2176 bool tdls_initiator; 2177 bool mfp; 2178 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2179 2180 /** 2181 * @max_amsdu_len: 2182 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2183 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2184 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2185 * 2186 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2187 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2188 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2189 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2190 * 2191 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2192 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2193 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2194 */ 2195 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2196 bool support_p2p_ps; 2197 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2198 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2199 2200 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2201 2202 u16 valid_links; 2203 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2204 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2205 2206 /* must be last */ 2207 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2208 }; 2209 2210 /** 2211 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2212 * 2213 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2214 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2215 * 2216 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2217 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2218 */ 2219 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2220 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2221 }; 2222 2223 /** 2224 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2225 * 2226 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2227 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2228 */ 2229 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2230 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2231 }; 2232 2233 /** 2234 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2235 * 2236 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2237 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2238 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2239 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2240 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2241 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2242 * 2243 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2244 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2245 */ 2246 struct ieee80211_txq { 2247 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2248 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2249 u8 tid; 2250 u8 ac; 2251 2252 /* must be last */ 2253 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2254 }; 2255 2256 /** 2257 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2258 * 2259 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2260 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2261 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2262 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2263 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2264 * 2265 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2266 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2267 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2268 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2269 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2270 * algorithm. 2271 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2272 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2273 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2274 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2275 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2276 * CCK frames. 2277 * 2278 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2279 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2280 * the FCS at the end. 2281 * 2282 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2283 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2284 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2285 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2286 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2287 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2288 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2289 * 2290 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2291 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2292 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2293 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2294 * 2295 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2296 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2297 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2298 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2299 * 2300 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2301 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2302 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2303 * 2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2305 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2306 * 2307 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2308 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2309 * 2310 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2311 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2312 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2313 * 2314 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2315 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2316 * 2317 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2318 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2319 * 2320 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2321 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2322 * the stack. 2323 * 2324 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2325 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2326 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2327 * 2328 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2329 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2330 * dtim_period). 2331 * 2332 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2333 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2334 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2335 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2336 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2337 * only in that case. 2338 * 2339 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2340 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2341 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2342 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2343 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2344 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2345 * 2346 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2347 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2348 * software. 2349 * 2350 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2351 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2352 * active interfaces. 2353 * 2354 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2355 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2356 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2357 * 2358 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2359 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2360 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2361 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2362 * supported cipher suites. 2363 * 2364 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2365 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2366 * for frames. 2367 * 2368 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2369 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2370 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2371 * control for more details. 2372 * 2373 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2374 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2375 * 2376 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2377 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2378 * is supported. 2379 * 2380 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2381 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2382 * 2383 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2384 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2385 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2386 * 2387 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2388 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2389 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2390 * CSA frame. 2391 * 2392 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2393 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2394 * 2395 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2396 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2397 * 2398 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2399 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2400 * 2401 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2402 * within A-MPDU. 2403 * 2404 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2405 * for sent beacons. 2406 * 2407 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2408 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2409 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2410 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2411 * 2412 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2413 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2414 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2415 * timeout. 2416 * 2417 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2418 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2419 * 2420 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2421 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2422 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2423 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2424 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2425 * 2426 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2427 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2428 * 2429 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2430 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2431 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2432 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2433 * 2434 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2435 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2436 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2437 * 2438 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2439 * TDLS links. 2440 * 2441 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2442 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2443 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2444 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2445 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2446 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2447 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2448 * 2449 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2450 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2451 * 2452 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2453 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2454 * 2455 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2456 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2457 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2458 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2459 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2460 * 2461 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2462 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2463 * TXQs to start with. 2464 * 2465 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2466 * length in tx status information 2467 * 2468 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2469 * 2470 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2471 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2472 * 2473 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2474 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2475 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2476 * 2477 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2478 * offload 2479 * 2480 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 2481 * offload 2482 * 2483 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 2484 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 2485 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 2486 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 2487 * the stack. 2488 * 2489 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 2490 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 2491 * 2492 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2493 */ 2494 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2495 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2496 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2497 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2498 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2499 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2500 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2501 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2502 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2503 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2504 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2505 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2506 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2507 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2508 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2509 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2510 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2511 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2512 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2513 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2514 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2515 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2516 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2517 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2518 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2519 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2520 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2521 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2522 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2523 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2524 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2525 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2526 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2527 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2528 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2529 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2530 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2531 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2532 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2533 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2534 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2535 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2536 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2537 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2538 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2539 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2540 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2541 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2542 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2543 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2544 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2545 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 2546 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 2547 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 2548 2549 /* keep last, obviously */ 2550 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2551 }; 2552 2553 /** 2554 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2555 * 2556 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2557 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2558 * 2559 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2560 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2561 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2562 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2563 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2564 * 2565 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2566 * 2567 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2568 * along with this structure. 2569 * 2570 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2571 * 2572 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2573 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2574 * 2575 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2576 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2577 * 2578 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2579 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2580 * 2581 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2582 * that HW supports 2583 * 2584 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2585 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2586 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2587 * 2588 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2589 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2590 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2591 * 2592 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2593 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2594 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2595 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2596 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2597 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2598 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2599 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2600 * 2601 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2602 * can handle. 2603 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2604 * the hw can report back. 2605 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2606 * 2607 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2608 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2609 * aggregation. 2610 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2611 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2612 * it shouldn't be set. 2613 * 2614 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2615 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2616 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2617 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2618 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2619 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2620 * 2621 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2622 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2623 * 2624 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2625 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2626 * 2627 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2628 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2629 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2630 * adding _BW is supported today. 2631 * 2632 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2633 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2634 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2635 * 2636 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2637 * 2638 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2639 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2640 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2641 * device_timestamp. 2642 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2643 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2644 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2645 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2646 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2647 * 2648 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2649 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2650 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2651 * 2652 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2653 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2654 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2655 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2656 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2657 * neither enabled. 2658 * 2659 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2660 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2661 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2662 * 2663 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2664 * device. 2665 * 2666 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2667 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2668 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2669 * 2670 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2671 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2672 * 2673 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2674 * 2675 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 2676 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 2677 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 2678 * 2679 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 2680 */ 2681 struct ieee80211_hw { 2682 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2683 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2684 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2685 void *priv; 2686 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2687 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2688 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2689 int vif_data_size; 2690 int sta_data_size; 2691 int chanctx_data_size; 2692 int txq_data_size; 2693 u16 queues; 2694 u16 max_listen_interval; 2695 s8 max_signal; 2696 u8 max_rates; 2697 u8 max_report_rates; 2698 u8 max_rate_tries; 2699 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2700 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2701 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2702 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2703 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2704 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2705 struct { 2706 int units_pos; 2707 s16 accuracy; 2708 } radiotap_timestamp; 2709 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2710 u8 uapsd_queues; 2711 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2712 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2713 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2714 u8 weight_multiplier; 2715 u32 max_mtu; 2716 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 2717 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 2718 }; 2719 2720 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2721 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2722 { 2723 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2724 } 2725 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2726 2727 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2728 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2729 { 2730 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2731 } 2732 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2733 2734 /** 2735 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2736 * 2737 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2738 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2739 */ 2740 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2741 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2742 2743 /* Keep last */ 2744 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2745 }; 2746 2747 /** 2748 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2749 * 2750 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2751 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2752 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2753 * @status: channel-switch response status 2754 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2755 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2756 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2757 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2758 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2759 */ 2760 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2761 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2762 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2763 u8 action_code; 2764 u32 status; 2765 u32 timestamp; 2766 u16 switch_time; 2767 u16 switch_timeout; 2768 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2769 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2770 }; 2771 2772 /** 2773 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2774 * 2775 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2776 * 2777 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2778 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2779 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2780 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2781 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2782 * 2783 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2784 */ 2785 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2786 2787 /** 2788 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2789 * 2790 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2791 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2792 */ 2793 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2794 { 2795 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2796 } 2797 2798 /** 2799 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2800 * 2801 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 2802 * @addr: the address to set 2803 */ 2804 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 2805 { 2806 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 2807 } 2808 2809 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2810 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2811 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2812 { 2813 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 2814 return NULL; 2815 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 2816 } 2817 2818 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2819 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2820 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2821 { 2822 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 2823 return NULL; 2824 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 2825 } 2826 2827 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2828 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2829 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 2830 { 2831 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 2832 return NULL; 2833 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 2834 } 2835 2836 /** 2837 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 2838 * @hw: the hardware 2839 * @skb: the skb 2840 * 2841 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 2842 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 2843 */ 2844 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 2845 2846 /** 2847 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 2848 * 2849 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 2850 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 2851 * 2852 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 2853 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 2854 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 2855 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 2856 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 2857 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 2858 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 2859 * 2860 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 2861 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 2862 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 2863 * 2864 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 2865 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 2866 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 2867 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range. 2868 * 2869 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 2870 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 2871 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 2872 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 2873 * 2874 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 2875 * 2876 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 2877 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any 2878 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 2879 * based on the receive flags. 2880 * 2881 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 2882 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 2883 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 2884 * keys. 2885 * 2886 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 2887 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 2888 * handler. 2889 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 2890 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 2891 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 2892 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 2893 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 2894 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 2895 * 2896 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 2897 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 2898 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 2899 * 2900 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 2901 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 2902 * requirements: 2903 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 2904 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 2905 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 2906 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 2907 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 2908 encrypted with the new key when also needing 2909 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 2910 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 2911 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 2912 */ 2913 2914 /** 2915 * DOC: Powersave support 2916 * 2917 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 2918 * 2919 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself, 2920 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 2921 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 2922 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 2923 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 2924 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 2925 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 2926 * it finds traffic directed to it. 2927 * 2928 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 2929 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 2930 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 2931 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 2932 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 2933 * 2934 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 2935 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 2936 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 2937 * 2938 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 2939 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 2940 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 2941 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 2942 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 2943 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 2944 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that. 2945 * 2946 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 2947 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 2948 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 2949 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when 2950 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 2951 * periods. 2952 * 2953 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 2954 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 2955 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 2956 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 2957 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 2958 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 2959 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 2960 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 2961 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 2962 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 2963 * 2964 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 2965 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 2966 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 2967 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 2968 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 2969 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 2970 * 2971 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 2972 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 2973 */ 2974 2975 /** 2976 * DOC: Beacon filter support 2977 * 2978 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 2979 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 2980 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 2981 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 2982 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 2983 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 2984 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 2985 * 2986 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 2987 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 2988 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 2989 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 2990 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 2991 * 2992 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 2993 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 2994 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 2995 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 2996 * 2997 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 2998 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 2999 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3000 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3001 * 3002 * - a list of information element IDs 3003 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3004 * 3005 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3006 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3007 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3008 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3009 * vendor information elements. 3010 * 3011 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3012 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3013 * 3014 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing 3015 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3016 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3017 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3018 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3019 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3020 * 3021 * 3022 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3023 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3024 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3025 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when 3026 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3027 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3028 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3029 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3030 * 3031 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3032 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3033 * signal strength threshold checking. 3034 */ 3035 3036 /** 3037 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3038 * 3039 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3040 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3041 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3042 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3043 * 3044 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3045 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3046 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3047 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3048 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3049 * hardware flags. 3050 * 3051 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3052 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3053 * turned off otherwise. 3054 * 3055 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3056 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3057 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3058 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3059 */ 3060 3061 /** 3062 * DOC: Frame filtering 3063 * 3064 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3065 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3066 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3067 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3068 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3069 * 3070 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3071 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3072 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3073 * 3074 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3075 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3076 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3077 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3078 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3079 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3080 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3081 * 3082 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3083 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3084 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3085 * or dropped. 3086 * 3087 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3088 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3089 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3090 * the flag, but not clear it. 3091 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3092 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3093 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3094 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3095 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3096 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3097 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3098 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3099 */ 3100 3101 /** 3102 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3103 * 3104 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3105 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3106 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3107 * 3108 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3109 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3110 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3111 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3112 * the driver code. 3113 * 3114 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3115 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3116 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3117 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3118 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3119 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3120 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3121 * 3122 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3123 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3124 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3125 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3126 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3127 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3128 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3129 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3130 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3131 * @sta_notify callback. 3132 * 3133 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3134 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3135 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3136 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3137 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3138 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3139 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3140 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3141 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3142 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3143 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3144 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3145 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3146 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3147 * 3148 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3149 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3150 * 3151 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3152 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3153 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3154 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3155 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3156 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3157 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3158 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3159 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3160 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3161 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3162 * 3163 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3164 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3165 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3166 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3167 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3168 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3169 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3170 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3171 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3172 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames, 3173 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3174 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3175 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3176 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3177 * 3178 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3179 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3180 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3181 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3182 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3183 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3184 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3185 * 3186 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3187 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3188 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3189 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3190 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3191 * 3192 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3193 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3194 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3195 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3196 */ 3197 3198 /** 3199 * DOC: HW queue control 3200 * 3201 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3202 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3203 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3204 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3205 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3206 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3207 * 3208 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3209 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3210 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3211 * 3212 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3213 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3214 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3215 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3216 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3217 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3218 * the hardware queue. 3219 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3220 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3221 * 3222 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual 3223 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3224 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3225 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3226 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3227 * 3228 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3229 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3230 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3231 * off-channel queue: 9 3232 * 3233 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3234 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3235 * 3236 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3237 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3238 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3239 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3240 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3241 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3242 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3243 * 3244 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3245 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3246 * 3247 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3248 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3249 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3250 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3251 */ 3252 3253 /** 3254 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3255 * 3256 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3257 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3258 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3259 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3260 * 3261 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3262 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3263 * multicast address. 3264 * 3265 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3266 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3267 * 3268 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3269 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3270 * 3271 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3272 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3273 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3274 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3275 * honour this flag if possible. 3276 * 3277 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3278 * station 3279 * 3280 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3281 * 3282 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3283 * 3284 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3285 * 3286 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3287 */ 3288 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3289 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3290 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3291 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3292 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3293 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3294 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3295 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3296 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3297 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3298 }; 3299 3300 /** 3301 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3302 * 3303 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3304 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3305 * 3306 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3307 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3308 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3309 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3310 * 3311 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3312 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3313 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3314 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3315 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3316 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3317 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3318 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3319 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3320 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3321 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3322 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3323 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3324 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3325 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3326 * session is gone and removes the station. 3327 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3328 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3329 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3330 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3331 */ 3332 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3333 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3334 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3335 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3336 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3337 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3338 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3339 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3340 }; 3341 3342 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3343 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3344 3345 /** 3346 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3347 * 3348 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3349 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3350 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3351 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3352 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3353 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3354 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3355 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3356 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3357 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3358 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3359 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3360 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3361 */ 3362 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3363 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3364 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3365 u16 tid; 3366 u16 ssn; 3367 u16 buf_size; 3368 bool amsdu; 3369 u16 timeout; 3370 }; 3371 3372 /** 3373 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3374 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3375 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3376 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3377 */ 3378 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3379 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3380 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3381 }; 3382 3383 /** 3384 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3385 * 3386 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3387 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3388 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3389 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3390 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3391 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3392 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3393 * the peer. 3394 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3395 * by the peer 3396 */ 3397 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3398 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3399 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3400 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3401 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3402 }; 3403 3404 /** 3405 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3406 * 3407 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3408 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3409 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3410 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3411 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3412 * 3413 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3414 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3415 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3416 */ 3417 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3418 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3419 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3420 }; 3421 3422 /** 3423 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 3424 * 3425 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3426 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3427 * 3428 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3429 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3430 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3431 * of wowlan configuration) 3432 */ 3433 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3434 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3435 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3436 }; 3437 3438 /** 3439 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 3440 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 3441 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3442 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 3443 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 3444 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 3445 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 3446 */ 3447 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 3448 u16 duration; 3449 u16 subtype; 3450 u8 success:1; 3451 }; 3452 3453 /** 3454 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3455 * 3456 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3457 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3458 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3459 * 3460 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3461 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3462 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3463 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3464 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3465 * Must be atomic. 3466 * 3467 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3468 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3469 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3470 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3471 * or zero. 3472 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3473 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3474 * is added. 3475 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3476 * 3477 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3478 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3479 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3480 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3481 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3482 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3483 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3484 * 3485 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3486 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3487 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3488 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3489 * reconfigured at resume time. 3490 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3491 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3492 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3493 * must return 1 from this function. 3494 * 3495 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3496 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3497 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3498 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3499 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3500 * 3501 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3502 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3503 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3504 * in suspend(). 3505 * 3506 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3507 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3508 * and @stop must be implemented. 3509 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3510 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3511 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3512 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3513 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3514 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3515 * 3516 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3517 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3518 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3519 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3520 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3521 * 3522 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3523 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3524 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3525 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3526 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3527 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3528 * MAC address of the device going away. 3529 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3530 * 3531 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3532 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3533 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3534 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3535 * 3536 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3537 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3538 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3539 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3540 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3541 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3542 * can sleep. 3543 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 3544 * are not implemented. 3545 * 3546 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 3547 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 3548 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 3549 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 3550 * The callback can sleep. 3551 * 3552 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 3553 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 3554 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 3555 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 3556 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 3557 * non-MLO connections. 3558 * The callback can sleep. 3559 * 3560 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3561 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3562 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3563 * 3564 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3565 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3566 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3567 * 3568 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3569 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3570 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3571 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3572 * which flags are changed. 3573 * This callback can sleep. 3574 * 3575 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3576 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3577 * 3578 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3579 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3580 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3581 * is enabled. 3582 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3583 * The callback can sleep. 3584 * 3585 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3586 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3587 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3588 * The callback must be atomic. 3589 * 3590 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3591 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3592 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3593 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3594 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3595 * 3596 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3597 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3598 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3599 * 3600 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3601 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3602 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3603 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3604 * that power save is disabled. 3605 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3606 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3607 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3608 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3609 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3610 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3611 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3612 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3613 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3614 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3615 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3616 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3617 * The callback can sleep. 3618 * 3619 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3620 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3621 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3622 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3623 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3624 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3625 * The callback can sleep. 3626 * 3627 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3628 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3629 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3630 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3631 * 3632 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3633 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3634 * 3635 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3636 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3637 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3638 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3639 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3640 * 3641 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3642 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3643 * this notification. 3644 * The callback can sleep. 3645 * 3646 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3647 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3648 * The callback can sleep. 3649 * 3650 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3651 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3652 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3653 * The callback must be atomic. 3654 * 3655 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3656 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3657 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3658 * should be set as well. 3659 * The callback can sleep. 3660 * 3661 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3662 * The callback can sleep. 3663 * 3664 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3665 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3666 * 3667 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3668 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3669 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3670 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3671 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3672 * This callback can sleep. 3673 * 3674 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3675 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3676 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3677 * callback can sleep. 3678 * 3679 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3680 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3681 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3682 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3683 * 3684 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 3685 * power for the station. 3686 * This callback can sleep. 3687 * 3688 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3689 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3690 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3691 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3692 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3693 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3694 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3695 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3696 * The callback can sleep. 3697 * 3698 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3699 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3700 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3701 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3702 * in @sta_state. 3703 * The callback can sleep. 3704 * 3705 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3706 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3707 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3708 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3709 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3710 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3711 * Must be atomic. 3712 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3713 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3714 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3715 * 3716 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3717 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3718 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3719 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3720 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3721 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3722 * The callback can sleep. 3723 * 3724 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3725 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3726 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3727 * The callback can sleep. 3728 * 3729 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3730 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3731 * required function. 3732 * The callback can sleep. 3733 * 3734 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3735 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3736 * required function. 3737 * The callback can sleep. 3738 * 3739 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3740 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3741 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3742 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3743 * The callback can sleep. 3744 * 3745 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3746 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3747 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3748 * TSF synchronization. 3749 * The callback can sleep. 3750 * 3751 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3752 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3753 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3754 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3755 * The callback can sleep. 3756 * 3757 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3758 * 3759 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3760 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3761 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3762 * The callback can sleep. 3763 * 3764 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3765 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3766 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3767 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3768 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3769 * 3770 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3771 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3772 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3773 * 3774 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3775 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3776 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3777 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3778 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3779 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3780 * The callback can sleep. 3781 * 3782 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 3783 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 3784 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 3785 * completion of the channel switch. 3786 * 3787 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 3788 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 3789 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 3790 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 3791 * 3792 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 3793 * 3794 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 3795 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 3796 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 3797 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 3798 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 3799 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 3800 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 3801 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 3802 * must be accepted in this case. 3803 * This callback may sleep. 3804 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 3805 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 3806 * 3807 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 3808 * 3809 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 3810 * 3811 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 3812 * queues before entering power save. 3813 * 3814 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 3815 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 3816 * The callback can sleep. 3817 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 3818 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 3819 * The callback must be atomic. 3820 * 3821 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 3822 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 3823 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 3824 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 3825 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 3826 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 3827 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 3828 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 3829 * more-data bit must always be set. 3830 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 3831 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 3832 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 3833 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 3834 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3835 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 3836 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 3837 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 3838 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 3839 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 3840 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 3841 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 3842 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 3843 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 3844 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 3845 * This callback must be atomic. 3846 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 3847 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 3848 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 3849 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 3850 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 3851 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 3852 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3853 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 3854 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 3855 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 3856 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 3857 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 3858 * This callback must be atomic. 3859 * 3860 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 3861 * 3862 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 3863 * 3864 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 3865 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 3866 * 3867 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 3868 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 3869 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 3870 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 3871 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 3872 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 3873 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 3874 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 3875 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 3876 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 3877 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 3878 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 3879 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 3880 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 3881 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 3882 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 3883 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 3884 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 3885 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 3886 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 3887 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 3888 * 3889 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 3890 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 3891 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 3892 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 3893 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 3894 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 3895 * 2 * (DTIM period). 3896 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 3897 * 3898 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 3899 * This callback may sleep. 3900 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 3901 * This callback may sleep. 3902 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 3903 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 3904 * channel context with different settings 3905 * This callback may sleep. 3906 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 3907 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 3908 * This callback may sleep. 3909 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 3910 * unbound from vif. 3911 * This callback may sleep. 3912 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 3913 * another, as specified in the list of 3914 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 3915 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 3916 * This callback may sleep. 3917 * 3918 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 3919 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 3920 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 3921 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 3922 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 3923 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 3924 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 3925 * 3926 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 3927 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 3928 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 3929 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 3930 * This callback may sleep. 3931 * 3932 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 3933 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 3934 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 3935 * 3936 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 3937 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 3938 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 3939 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 3940 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 3941 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 3942 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 3943 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 3944 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 3945 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 3946 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3947 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 3948 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 3949 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 3950 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3951 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 3952 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3953 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 3954 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 3955 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 3956 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 3957 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 3958 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 3959 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 3960 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 3961 * channel context is bound before this is called. 3962 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 3963 * 3964 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 3965 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 3966 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 3967 * 3968 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 3969 * and hardware limits. 3970 * 3971 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 3972 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 3973 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 3974 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 3975 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 3976 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 3977 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 3978 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 3979 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 3980 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 3981 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 3982 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 3983 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 3984 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 3985 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 3986 * the function call. 3987 * 3988 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 3989 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 3990 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 3991 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 3992 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 3993 * 3994 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 3995 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 3996 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 3997 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 3998 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 3999 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4000 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4001 * changed parameters. 4002 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4003 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4004 * this call. 4005 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4006 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4007 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4008 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4009 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4010 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4011 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4012 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4013 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4014 * 4015 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4016 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4017 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4018 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4019 * This callback may sleep. 4020 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4021 * This callback may sleep. 4022 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4023 * 4-address mode 4024 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4025 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4026 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4027 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4028 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4029 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4030 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4031 * twt structure. 4032 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4033 * from the peer. 4034 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4035 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4036 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4037 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4038 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4039 * radar channel. 4040 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4041 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4042 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4043 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4044 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4045 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4046 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4047 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4048 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4049 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4050 * This callback can sleep. 4051 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4052 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4053 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4054 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4055 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4056 */ 4057 struct ieee80211_ops { 4058 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4059 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4060 struct sk_buff *skb); 4061 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4062 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4063 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4064 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4065 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4066 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4067 #endif 4068 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4069 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4070 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4071 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4072 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4073 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4074 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4075 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 4076 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4077 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4078 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4079 u64 changed); 4080 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4081 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4082 u64 changed); 4083 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4084 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4085 unsigned int link_id, u64 changed); 4086 4087 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4088 unsigned int link_id); 4089 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4090 unsigned int link_id); 4091 4092 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4093 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4094 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4095 unsigned int changed_flags, 4096 unsigned int *total_flags, 4097 u64 multicast); 4098 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4099 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4100 unsigned int filter_flags, 4101 unsigned int changed_flags); 4102 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4103 bool set); 4104 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4105 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4106 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4107 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4108 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4109 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4110 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4111 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4112 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4113 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4114 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4115 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4116 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4117 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4118 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4119 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4120 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4121 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4122 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4123 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4124 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4125 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4126 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4127 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4128 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4129 const u8 *mac_addr); 4130 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4131 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4132 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4133 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4134 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4135 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4136 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4137 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4138 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4139 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4140 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4141 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4142 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4143 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4144 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4145 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4146 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4147 struct dentry *dir); 4148 #endif 4149 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4150 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4151 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4152 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4153 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4154 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4155 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4156 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4157 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4158 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4159 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4160 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4161 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4162 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4163 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4164 u32 changed); 4165 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4166 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4167 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4168 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4169 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4170 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4171 struct station_info *sinfo); 4172 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4173 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac, 4174 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4175 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4176 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4177 u64 tsf); 4178 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4179 s64 offset); 4180 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4181 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4182 4183 /** 4184 * @ampdu_action: 4185 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4186 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4187 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4188 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4189 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4190 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4191 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4192 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4193 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4194 * 4195 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4196 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4197 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4198 * 4199 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4200 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4201 * 4202 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4203 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4204 * - ``TX: 81`` 4205 * 4206 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4207 * 4208 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4209 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4210 * if the session can start immediately. 4211 * 4212 * The callback can sleep. 4213 */ 4214 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4215 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4216 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4217 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4218 struct survey_info *survey); 4219 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4220 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4221 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4222 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4223 void *data, int len); 4224 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4225 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4226 void *data, int len); 4227 #endif 4228 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4229 u32 queues, bool drop); 4230 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4231 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4232 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4233 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4234 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4235 4236 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4237 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4238 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4239 int duration, 4240 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4241 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4242 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4243 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4244 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4245 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4246 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4247 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4248 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4249 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4250 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4251 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4252 4253 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4254 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4255 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4256 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4257 bool more_data); 4258 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4259 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4260 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4261 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4262 bool more_data); 4263 4264 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4265 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4266 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4267 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4268 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4269 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4270 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4271 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4272 4273 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4274 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4275 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4276 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4277 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4278 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4279 4280 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4281 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4282 4283 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4284 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4285 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4286 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4287 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4288 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4289 u32 changed); 4290 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4291 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4292 unsigned int link_id, 4293 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4294 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4295 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4296 unsigned int link_id, 4297 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4298 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4299 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4300 int n_vifs, 4301 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4302 4303 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4304 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4305 4306 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4307 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4308 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4309 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4310 #endif 4311 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4312 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4313 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4314 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4315 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4316 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4317 4318 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4319 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4320 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4321 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4322 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4323 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4324 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4325 4326 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4327 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4328 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4329 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4330 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4331 int *dbm); 4332 4333 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4334 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4335 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4336 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4337 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4338 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4339 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4340 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4341 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4342 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4343 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4344 4345 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4346 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4347 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4348 4349 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4350 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4351 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4352 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4353 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4354 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4355 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4356 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4357 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4358 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4359 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4360 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4361 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4362 u8 instance_id); 4363 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4364 struct sk_buff *head, 4365 struct sk_buff *skb); 4366 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4367 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4368 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4369 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4370 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4371 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4372 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4373 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4374 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4375 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4376 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4377 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4378 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4379 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4380 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4381 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4382 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4383 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4384 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4385 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 4386 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4387 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4388 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4389 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4390 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4391 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 4392 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4393 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 4394 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4395 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4396 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4397 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4398 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4399 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 4400 struct net_device_path *path); 4401 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4402 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4403 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 4404 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 4405 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4406 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4407 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4408 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 4409 }; 4410 4411 /** 4412 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4413 * 4414 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4415 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4416 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4417 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4418 * @priv_data_len. 4419 * 4420 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4421 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4422 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4423 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4424 * 4425 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4426 */ 4427 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4428 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4429 const char *requested_name); 4430 4431 /** 4432 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4433 * 4434 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4435 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4436 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4437 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4438 * @priv_data_len. 4439 * 4440 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4441 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4442 * 4443 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4444 */ 4445 static inline 4446 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4447 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4448 { 4449 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4450 } 4451 4452 /** 4453 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4454 * 4455 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4456 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4457 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4458 * 4459 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4460 * 4461 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4462 */ 4463 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4464 4465 /** 4466 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4467 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4468 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4469 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4470 */ 4471 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4472 int throughput; 4473 int blink_time; 4474 }; 4475 4476 /** 4477 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4478 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4479 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4480 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4481 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4482 */ 4483 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4484 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4485 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4486 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4487 }; 4488 4489 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4490 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4491 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4492 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4493 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4494 const char * 4495 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4496 unsigned int flags, 4497 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4498 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4499 #endif 4500 /** 4501 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4502 * 4503 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4504 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4505 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4506 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4507 * 4508 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4509 * 4510 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4511 */ 4512 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4513 { 4514 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4515 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4516 #else 4517 return NULL; 4518 #endif 4519 } 4520 4521 /** 4522 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4523 * 4524 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4525 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4526 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4527 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4528 * 4529 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4530 * 4531 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4532 */ 4533 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4534 { 4535 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4536 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4537 #else 4538 return NULL; 4539 #endif 4540 } 4541 4542 /** 4543 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4544 * 4545 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4546 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4547 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4548 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4549 * 4550 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4551 * 4552 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4553 */ 4554 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4555 { 4556 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4557 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4558 #else 4559 return NULL; 4560 #endif 4561 } 4562 4563 /** 4564 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4565 * 4566 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4567 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4568 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4569 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4570 * 4571 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4572 * 4573 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4574 */ 4575 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4576 { 4577 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4578 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4579 #else 4580 return NULL; 4581 #endif 4582 } 4583 4584 /** 4585 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4586 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4587 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4588 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4589 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4590 * 4591 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4592 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4593 * 4594 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4595 */ 4596 static inline const char * 4597 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4598 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4599 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4600 { 4601 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4602 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4603 blink_table_len); 4604 #else 4605 return NULL; 4606 #endif 4607 } 4608 4609 /** 4610 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4611 * 4612 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4613 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4614 * 4615 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4616 */ 4617 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4618 4619 /** 4620 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4621 * 4622 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4623 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4624 * before calling this function. 4625 * 4626 * @hw: the hardware to free 4627 */ 4628 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4629 4630 /** 4631 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4632 * 4633 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4634 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4635 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4636 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4637 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4638 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4639 * 4640 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4641 */ 4642 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4643 4644 /** 4645 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 4646 * 4647 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4648 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4649 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4650 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4651 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4652 * 4653 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4654 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4655 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4656 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4657 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4658 * 4659 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 4660 * 4661 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4662 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4663 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4664 * @list: the destination list 4665 */ 4666 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4667 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 4668 4669 /** 4670 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4671 * 4672 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4673 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4674 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4675 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4676 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4677 * 4678 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4679 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4680 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4681 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4682 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4683 * 4684 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4685 * 4686 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4687 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4688 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4689 * @napi: the NAPI context 4690 */ 4691 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4692 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4693 4694 /** 4695 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4696 * 4697 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4698 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4699 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4700 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4701 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4702 * 4703 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4704 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4705 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4706 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4707 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4708 * 4709 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4710 * 4711 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4712 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4713 */ 4714 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4715 { 4716 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4717 } 4718 4719 /** 4720 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4721 * 4722 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4723 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4724 * 4725 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4726 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4727 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4728 * 4729 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4730 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4731 */ 4732 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4733 4734 /** 4735 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4736 * 4737 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4738 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4739 * 4740 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4741 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4742 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4743 * 4744 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4745 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4746 */ 4747 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4748 struct sk_buff *skb) 4749 { 4750 local_bh_disable(); 4751 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 4752 local_bh_enable(); 4753 } 4754 4755 /** 4756 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 4757 * 4758 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 4759 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 4760 * entering/leaving PS mode. 4761 * 4762 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 4763 * 4764 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 4765 * each other. 4766 * 4767 * @sta: currently connected sta 4768 * @start: start or stop PS 4769 * 4770 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 4771 */ 4772 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 4773 4774 /** 4775 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 4776 * (in process context) 4777 * 4778 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 4779 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 4780 * applies. 4781 * 4782 * @sta: currently connected sta 4783 * @start: start or stop PS 4784 * 4785 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 4786 */ 4787 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4788 bool start) 4789 { 4790 int ret; 4791 4792 local_bh_disable(); 4793 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 4794 local_bh_enable(); 4795 4796 return ret; 4797 } 4798 4799 /** 4800 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 4801 * @sta: currently connected station 4802 * 4803 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4804 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 4805 * connected station was received. 4806 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4807 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 4808 * be serialized. 4809 */ 4810 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4811 4812 /** 4813 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 4814 * @sta: currently connected station 4815 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 4816 * 4817 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4818 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 4819 * from a connected station was received. 4820 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4821 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 4822 * serialized. 4823 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 4824 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 4825 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 4826 * checks. 4827 */ 4828 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 4829 4830 /* 4831 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 4832 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 4833 */ 4834 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 4835 4836 /** 4837 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 4838 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 4839 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 4840 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 4841 * 4842 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 4843 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 4844 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 4845 * 4846 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 4847 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 4848 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 4849 * call! Beware of the locking!) 4850 * 4851 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 4852 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 4853 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 4854 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 4855 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 4856 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 4857 * 4858 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 4859 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 4860 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 4861 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 4862 * use this API. 4863 */ 4864 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4865 u8 tid, bool buffered); 4866 4867 /** 4868 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 4869 * 4870 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 4871 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 4872 * rate selection table for the station entry. 4873 * 4874 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 4875 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 4876 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 4877 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 4878 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 4879 */ 4880 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4881 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4882 struct sk_buff *skb, 4883 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 4884 int max_rates); 4885 4886 /** 4887 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 4888 * 4889 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 4890 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 4891 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 4892 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 4893 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 4894 * slow stations to starve). 4895 * 4896 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 4897 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 4898 */ 4899 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4900 u32 thr); 4901 4902 /** 4903 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 4904 * 4905 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 4906 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 4907 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 4908 * 4909 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4910 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 4911 * @info: tx status information 4912 */ 4913 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4914 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 4915 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 4916 4917 /** 4918 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback 4919 * 4920 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 4921 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 4922 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 4923 * 4924 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4925 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 4926 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 4927 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4928 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4929 * 4930 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4931 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4932 */ 4933 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4934 struct sk_buff *skb); 4935 4936 /** 4937 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 4938 * 4939 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4940 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 4941 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 4942 * 4943 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4944 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4945 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4946 * 4947 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4948 * @status: tx status information 4949 */ 4950 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4951 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 4952 4953 /** 4954 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 4955 * 4956 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 4957 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 4958 * specific skbs. 4959 * 4960 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 4961 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 4962 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 4963 * 4964 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4965 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 4966 * (NULL for multicast packets) 4967 * @info: tx status information 4968 */ 4969 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4970 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4971 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 4972 { 4973 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 4974 .sta = sta, 4975 .info = info, 4976 }; 4977 4978 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 4979 } 4980 4981 /** 4982 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 4983 * 4984 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context. 4985 * 4986 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 4987 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 4988 * for a single hardware. 4989 * 4990 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 4991 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 4992 */ 4993 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4994 struct sk_buff *skb) 4995 { 4996 local_bh_disable(); 4997 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb); 4998 local_bh_enable(); 4999 } 5000 5001 /** 5002 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5003 * 5004 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context 5005 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5006 * 5007 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 5008 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5009 * 5010 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5011 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5012 */ 5013 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5014 struct sk_buff *skb); 5015 5016 /** 5017 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format 5018 * 5019 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit 5020 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which 5021 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap 5022 * 802.11 frames. 5023 * 5024 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5025 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all 5026 * calls in the same tx status family. 5027 * 5028 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5029 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted 5030 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5031 */ 5032 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5033 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5034 struct sk_buff *skb); 5035 5036 /** 5037 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5038 * 5039 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5040 * connected STA. 5041 * 5042 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5043 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5044 */ 5045 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5046 5047 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5048 5049 /** 5050 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5051 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5052 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5053 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5054 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5055 * should be ignored. 5056 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5057 */ 5058 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5059 u16 tim_offset; 5060 u16 tim_length; 5061 5062 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5063 u16 mbssid_off; 5064 }; 5065 5066 /** 5067 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5068 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5069 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5070 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5071 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5072 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5073 * 5074 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5075 * obtain the beacon template. 5076 * 5077 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5078 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5079 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5080 * applicable, the CSA count. 5081 * 5082 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5083 * 5084 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5085 */ 5086 struct sk_buff * 5087 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5088 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5089 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5090 unsigned int link_id); 5091 5092 /** 5093 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5094 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5095 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5096 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5097 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5098 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5099 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5100 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5101 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5102 * 5103 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5104 * obtain the beacon frame. 5105 * 5106 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5107 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5108 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5109 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5110 * 5111 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5112 * 5113 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5114 */ 5115 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5116 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5117 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5118 unsigned int link_id); 5119 5120 /** 5121 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5122 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5123 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5124 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5125 * 5126 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5127 * 5128 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5129 */ 5130 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5131 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5132 unsigned int link_id) 5133 { 5134 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5135 } 5136 5137 /** 5138 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5139 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5140 * 5141 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5142 * This function is called implicitly when 5143 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5144 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5145 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5146 * 5147 * Return: new countdown value 5148 */ 5149 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5150 5151 /** 5152 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5153 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5154 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5155 * 5156 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5157 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5158 * 5159 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5160 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5161 */ 5162 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5163 5164 /** 5165 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5166 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5167 * 5168 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5169 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5170 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5171 */ 5172 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5173 5174 /** 5175 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5176 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5177 * 5178 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero. 5179 */ 5180 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5181 5182 /** 5183 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5184 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5185 * 5186 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5187 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5188 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5189 */ 5190 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5191 5192 /** 5193 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5194 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5195 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5196 * 5197 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5198 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5199 * 5200 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5201 * 5202 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5203 */ 5204 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5205 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5206 5207 /** 5208 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5209 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5210 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5211 * 5212 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5213 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5214 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5215 * 5216 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5217 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5218 * 5219 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5220 */ 5221 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5222 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5223 5224 /** 5225 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5226 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5227 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5228 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5229 * if at all possible 5230 * 5231 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5232 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5233 * BSSID and address is used. 5234 * 5235 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5236 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5237 * 5238 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5239 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5240 * 5241 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5242 */ 5243 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5244 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5245 bool qos_ok); 5246 5247 /** 5248 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5249 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5250 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5251 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5252 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5253 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5254 * 5255 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5256 * hardware. 5257 * 5258 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5259 */ 5260 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5261 const u8 *src_addr, 5262 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5263 size_t tailroom); 5264 5265 /** 5266 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5267 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5268 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5269 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5270 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5271 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5272 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5273 * 5274 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5275 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5276 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5277 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5278 */ 5279 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5280 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5281 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5282 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5283 5284 /** 5285 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5286 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5287 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5288 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5289 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5290 * 5291 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5292 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5293 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5294 * 5295 * Return: The duration. 5296 */ 5297 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5298 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5299 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5300 5301 /** 5302 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5303 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5304 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5305 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5306 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5307 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5308 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5309 * 5310 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5311 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5312 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5313 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5314 */ 5315 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5316 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5317 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5318 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5319 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5320 5321 /** 5322 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5323 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5324 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5325 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5326 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5327 * 5328 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5329 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5330 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5331 * 5332 * Return: The duration. 5333 */ 5334 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5335 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5336 size_t frame_len, 5337 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5338 5339 /** 5340 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5341 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5342 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5343 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5344 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5345 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5346 * 5347 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5348 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5349 * 5350 * Return: The duration. 5351 */ 5352 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5353 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5354 enum nl80211_band band, 5355 size_t frame_len, 5356 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5357 5358 /** 5359 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5360 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5361 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5362 * 5363 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5364 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5365 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5366 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5367 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5368 * 5369 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5370 * frames are available. 5371 * 5372 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5373 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5374 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5375 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5376 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5377 * use common code for all beacons. 5378 */ 5379 struct sk_buff * 5380 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5381 5382 /** 5383 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5384 * 5385 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5386 * 5387 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5388 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5389 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5390 */ 5391 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5392 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5393 5394 /** 5395 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5396 * 5397 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5398 * from the given packet. 5399 * 5400 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5401 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5402 * with this P1K 5403 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5404 */ 5405 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5406 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5407 { 5408 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5409 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5410 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5411 5412 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5413 } 5414 5415 /** 5416 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5417 * 5418 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5419 * and transmitter address. 5420 * 5421 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5422 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5423 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5424 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5425 */ 5426 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5427 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5428 5429 /** 5430 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5431 * 5432 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5433 * in the packet. 5434 * 5435 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5436 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5437 * encrypted with this key 5438 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5439 */ 5440 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5441 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5442 5443 /** 5444 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5445 * 5446 * @pos: start of crypto header 5447 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5448 * @pn: PN to add 5449 * 5450 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5451 * the packet payload) 5452 * 5453 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5454 * point to the crypto header) 5455 */ 5456 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5457 5458 /** 5459 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5460 * 5461 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5462 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5463 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5464 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5465 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5466 * 5467 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5468 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5469 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5470 * 5471 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5472 * can be done concurrently. 5473 */ 5474 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5475 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5476 5477 /** 5478 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5479 * 5480 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5481 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5482 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5483 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5484 * @seq: new sequence data 5485 * 5486 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5487 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5488 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5489 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5490 * 5491 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5492 * can be done concurrently. 5493 */ 5494 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5495 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5496 5497 /** 5498 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5499 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5500 * 5501 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5502 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5503 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5504 * 5505 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5506 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5507 */ 5508 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5509 5510 /** 5511 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5512 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5513 * @keyconf: new key data 5514 * 5515 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5516 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5517 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5518 * 5519 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5520 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5521 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5522 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5523 * 5524 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5525 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5526 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5527 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5528 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5529 * of the reconfiguration. 5530 * 5531 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5532 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5533 * 5534 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5535 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5536 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5537 * the key that's being replaced. 5538 */ 5539 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5540 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5541 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5542 5543 /** 5544 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5545 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5546 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5547 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5548 * @gfp: allocation flags 5549 */ 5550 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5551 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5552 5553 /** 5554 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 5555 * 5556 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5557 * at the same time. 5558 * 5559 * @keyconf: the key in question 5560 */ 5561 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5562 5563 /** 5564 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 5565 * 5566 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5567 * at the same time. 5568 * 5569 * @keyconf: the key in question 5570 */ 5571 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5572 5573 /** 5574 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5575 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5576 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5577 * 5578 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5579 */ 5580 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5581 5582 /** 5583 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5584 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5585 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5586 * 5587 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5588 */ 5589 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5590 5591 /** 5592 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5593 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5594 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5595 * 5596 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5597 * 5598 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5599 */ 5600 5601 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5602 5603 /** 5604 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5605 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5606 * 5607 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5608 */ 5609 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5610 5611 /** 5612 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5613 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5614 * 5615 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5616 */ 5617 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5618 5619 /** 5620 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5621 * 5622 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5623 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5624 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5625 * any context, including hardirq context. 5626 * 5627 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5628 * @info: information about the completed scan 5629 */ 5630 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5631 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5632 5633 /** 5634 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5635 * 5636 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5637 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5638 * 5639 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5640 */ 5641 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5642 5643 /** 5644 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5645 * 5646 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5647 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5648 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5649 * while associating, for instance. 5650 * 5651 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5652 */ 5653 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5654 5655 /** 5656 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5657 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5658 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5659 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5660 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5661 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5662 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5663 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5664 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5665 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 5666 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 5667 * for instance. 5668 */ 5669 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5670 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5671 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5672 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5673 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 5674 }; 5675 5676 /** 5677 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5678 * 5679 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5680 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5681 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5682 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5683 * 5684 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5685 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5686 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5687 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5688 */ 5689 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5690 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5691 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5692 void *data); 5693 5694 /** 5695 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 5696 * 5697 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5698 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5699 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5700 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 5701 * be used. 5702 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5703 * 5704 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5705 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5706 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5707 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5708 */ 5709 static inline void 5710 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5711 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5712 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5713 void *data) 5714 { 5715 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 5716 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 5717 iterator, data); 5718 } 5719 5720 /** 5721 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 5722 * 5723 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5724 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5725 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5726 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 5727 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5728 * 5729 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5730 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5731 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5732 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5733 */ 5734 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5735 u32 iter_flags, 5736 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5737 u8 *mac, 5738 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5739 void *data); 5740 5741 /** 5742 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 5743 * 5744 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5745 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5746 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 5747 * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in 5748 * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within 5749 * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks. 5750 * 5751 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5752 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5753 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5754 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5755 */ 5756 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5757 u32 iter_flags, 5758 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5759 u8 *mac, 5760 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5761 void *data); 5762 5763 /** 5764 * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations 5765 * 5766 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5767 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5768 * function for them. 5769 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5770 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used. 5771 * 5772 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5773 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5774 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5775 */ 5776 void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5777 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5778 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5779 void *data); 5780 5781 /** 5782 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 5783 * 5784 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5785 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5786 * function for them. 5787 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5788 * 5789 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5790 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5791 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5792 */ 5793 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5794 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5795 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5796 void *data); 5797 /** 5798 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5799 * 5800 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 5801 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 5802 * 5803 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5804 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 5805 */ 5806 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 5807 5808 /** 5809 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5810 * 5811 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 5812 * workqueue. 5813 * 5814 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5815 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 5816 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 5817 */ 5818 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5819 struct delayed_work *dwork, 5820 unsigned long delay); 5821 5822 /** 5823 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 5824 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 5825 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5826 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 5827 * 5828 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 5829 * 5830 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5831 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5832 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5833 */ 5834 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 5835 u16 timeout); 5836 5837 /** 5838 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 5839 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5840 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5841 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5842 * 5843 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5844 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 5845 * from any context. 5846 */ 5847 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5848 u16 tid); 5849 5850 /** 5851 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 5852 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 5853 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 5854 * 5855 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 5856 * 5857 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5858 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5859 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5860 */ 5861 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 5862 5863 /** 5864 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 5865 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5866 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5867 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 5868 * 5869 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5870 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 5871 * can be called from any context. 5872 */ 5873 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5874 u16 tid); 5875 5876 /** 5877 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 5878 * 5879 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 5880 * @addr: station's address 5881 * 5882 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5883 * 5884 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5885 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5886 */ 5887 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5888 const u8 *addr); 5889 5890 /** 5891 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 5892 * 5893 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 5894 * @addr: remote station's address 5895 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 5896 * 5897 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 5898 * 5899 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 5900 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 5901 * 5902 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 5903 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 5904 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 5905 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 5906 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 5907 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 5908 * is not reliable. 5909 * 5910 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 5911 */ 5912 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5913 const u8 *addr, 5914 const u8 *localaddr); 5915 5916 /** 5917 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 5918 * @hw: the hardware 5919 * @pubsta: the station 5920 * @block: whether to block or unblock 5921 * 5922 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 5923 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 5924 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 5925 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 5926 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 5927 * 5928 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 5929 * manner. 5930 * 5931 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 5932 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 5933 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 5934 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 5935 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 5936 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 5937 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 5938 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 5939 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 5940 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 5941 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 5942 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 5943 * woke up while blocked or not. 5944 */ 5945 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5946 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 5947 5948 /** 5949 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 5950 * @pubsta: the station 5951 * 5952 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 5953 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 5954 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 5955 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 5956 * 5957 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 5958 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 5959 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 5960 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 5961 * 5962 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 5963 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 5964 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 5965 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 5966 */ 5967 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 5968 5969 /** 5970 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 5971 * @pubsta: the station 5972 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 5973 * 5974 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 5975 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 5976 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 5977 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 5978 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 5979 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 5980 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 5981 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 5982 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 5983 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 5984 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 5985 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 5986 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 5987 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 5988 */ 5989 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 5990 5991 /** 5992 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 5993 * 5994 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 5995 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 5996 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 5997 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 5998 * 5999 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6000 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6001 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6002 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6003 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6004 * attempts. 6005 * 6006 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6007 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6008 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6009 * them to 0. 6010 * 6011 * @pubsta: the station 6012 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6013 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6014 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6015 */ 6016 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6017 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6018 6019 /** 6020 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6021 * 6022 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6023 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6024 * 6025 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6026 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 6027 */ 6028 bool 6029 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6030 6031 /** 6032 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6033 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6034 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6035 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6036 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6037 * 6038 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6039 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6040 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6041 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 6042 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 6043 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 6044 * 6045 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6046 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6047 * set_key callback. 6048 */ 6049 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6050 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6051 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6052 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6053 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6054 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6055 void *data), 6056 void *iter_data); 6057 6058 /** 6059 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6060 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6061 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6062 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6063 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6064 * 6065 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6066 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6067 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6068 * in removal process will be skipped. 6069 * 6070 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6071 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6072 */ 6073 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6074 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6075 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6076 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6077 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6078 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6079 void *data), 6080 void *iter_data); 6081 6082 /** 6083 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6084 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6085 * @iter: iterator function 6086 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6087 * 6088 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6089 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6090 * places while calling into the driver. 6091 * 6092 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6093 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6094 * removed. 6095 * 6096 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6097 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6098 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6099 * or not. 6100 */ 6101 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6102 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6103 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6104 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6105 void *data), 6106 void *iter_data); 6107 6108 /** 6109 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6110 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6111 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6112 * 6113 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6114 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6115 * information. This function must only be called from within the 6116 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 6117 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 6118 * %NULL. 6119 * 6120 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6121 */ 6122 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6123 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6124 6125 /** 6126 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 6127 * 6128 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6129 * 6130 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 6131 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 6132 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 6133 */ 6134 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6135 6136 /** 6137 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 6138 * 6139 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6140 * 6141 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 6142 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 6143 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 6144 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 6145 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 6146 * 6147 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 6148 * without connection recovery attempts. 6149 */ 6150 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6151 6152 /** 6153 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 6154 * 6155 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6156 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 6157 * 6158 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 6159 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 6160 */ 6161 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 6162 6163 /** 6164 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 6165 * 6166 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6167 * 6168 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 6169 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 6170 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 6171 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 6172 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 6173 * 6174 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 6175 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 6176 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 6177 * disconnect normally later. 6178 * 6179 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 6180 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 6181 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 6182 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 6183 */ 6184 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6185 6186 /** 6187 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 6188 * hardware restart 6189 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6190 * 6191 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 6192 * hardware restart. 6193 */ 6194 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6195 6196 /** 6197 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 6198 * rssi threshold triggered 6199 * 6200 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6201 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 6202 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 6203 * @gfp: context flags 6204 * 6205 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 6206 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 6207 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 6208 */ 6209 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6210 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 6211 s32 rssi_level, 6212 gfp_t gfp); 6213 6214 /** 6215 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 6216 * 6217 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6218 * @gfp: context flags 6219 */ 6220 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 6221 6222 /** 6223 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 6224 * 6225 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6226 */ 6227 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6228 6229 /** 6230 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 6231 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6232 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 6233 * 6234 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 6235 * and wake up the suspended queues. 6236 */ 6237 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success); 6238 6239 /** 6240 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 6241 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6242 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame. 6243 * 6244 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 6245 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 6246 * a deauth frame in this case. 6247 */ 6248 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6249 bool block_tx); 6250 6251 /** 6252 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 6253 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6254 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 6255 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 6256 * 6257 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 6258 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 6259 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 6260 */ 6261 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6262 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 6263 6264 /** 6265 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 6266 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6267 */ 6268 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6269 6270 /** 6271 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 6272 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6273 */ 6274 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6275 6276 /** 6277 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 6278 * 6279 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 6280 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 6281 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 6282 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 6283 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 6284 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 6285 * 6286 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6287 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 6288 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 6289 */ 6290 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 6291 const u8 *addr); 6292 6293 /** 6294 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 6295 * @pubsta: station struct 6296 * @tid: the session's TID 6297 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 6298 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 6299 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 6300 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 6301 * 6302 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 6303 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 6304 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 6305 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 6306 */ 6307 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6308 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6309 u16 received_mpdus); 6310 6311 /** 6312 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6313 * 6314 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6315 * buffer. 6316 * 6317 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6318 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6319 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6320 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6321 */ 6322 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6323 6324 /** 6325 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6326 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6327 * @addr: station mac address 6328 * @tid: the rx tid 6329 */ 6330 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6331 unsigned int tid); 6332 6333 /** 6334 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6335 * 6336 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6337 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6338 * reordering. 6339 * 6340 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6341 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6342 * 6343 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6344 * @addr: station mac address 6345 * @tid: the rx tid 6346 */ 6347 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6348 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6349 { 6350 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6351 return; 6352 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6353 } 6354 6355 /** 6356 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6357 * 6358 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6359 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6360 * reordering. 6361 * 6362 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6363 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6364 * 6365 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6366 * @addr: station mac address 6367 * @tid: the rx tid 6368 */ 6369 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6370 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6371 { 6372 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6373 return; 6374 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6375 } 6376 6377 /** 6378 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6379 * 6380 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6381 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6382 * 6383 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6384 * 6385 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6386 * @addr: station mac address 6387 * @tid: the rx tid 6388 */ 6389 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6390 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6391 6392 /* Rate control API */ 6393 6394 /** 6395 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6396 * 6397 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6398 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6399 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6400 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6401 * to be filled in 6402 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6403 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6404 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6405 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6406 * RTS threshold 6407 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6408 * if the selected rate supports it 6409 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6410 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6411 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6412 */ 6413 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6414 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6415 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6416 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6417 struct sk_buff *skb; 6418 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6419 bool rts, short_preamble; 6420 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6421 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6422 bool bss; 6423 }; 6424 6425 /** 6426 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6427 */ 6428 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6429 /** 6430 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6431 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6432 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6433 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6434 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6435 */ 6436 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6437 /** 6438 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 6439 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 6440 */ 6441 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 6442 }; 6443 6444 struct rate_control_ops { 6445 unsigned long capa; 6446 const char *name; 6447 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6448 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 6449 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6450 void (*free)(void *priv); 6451 6452 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6453 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6454 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6455 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6456 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6457 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6458 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6459 u32 changed); 6460 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6461 void *priv_sta); 6462 6463 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6464 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6465 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6466 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6467 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6468 struct sk_buff *skb); 6469 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6470 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6471 6472 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6473 struct dentry *dir); 6474 6475 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6476 }; 6477 6478 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6479 enum nl80211_band band, 6480 int index) 6481 { 6482 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6483 } 6484 6485 static inline s8 6486 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6487 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6488 { 6489 int i; 6490 6491 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6492 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6493 return i; 6494 6495 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6496 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6497 6498 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6499 return 0; 6500 } 6501 6502 static inline 6503 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6504 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6505 { 6506 unsigned int i; 6507 6508 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6509 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6510 return true; 6511 return false; 6512 } 6513 6514 /** 6515 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6516 * 6517 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6518 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6519 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6520 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6521 * 6522 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6523 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6524 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6525 */ 6526 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6527 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6528 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6529 6530 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6531 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6532 6533 static inline bool 6534 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6535 { 6536 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6537 } 6538 6539 static inline bool 6540 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6541 { 6542 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6543 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6544 } 6545 6546 static inline bool 6547 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6548 { 6549 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6550 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6551 } 6552 6553 static inline bool 6554 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6555 { 6556 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6557 } 6558 6559 static inline bool 6560 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6561 { 6562 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6563 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6564 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6565 } 6566 6567 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6568 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6569 { 6570 if (p2p) { 6571 switch (type) { 6572 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6573 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6574 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6575 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6576 default: 6577 break; 6578 } 6579 } 6580 return type; 6581 } 6582 6583 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6584 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6585 { 6586 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6587 } 6588 6589 /** 6590 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6591 * 6592 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6593 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 6594 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6595 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6596 * 6597 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6598 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6599 * matching GroupId management frame. 6600 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6601 */ 6602 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6603 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6604 6605 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6606 int rssi_min_thold, 6607 int rssi_max_thold); 6608 6609 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6610 6611 /** 6612 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6613 * 6614 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6615 * 6616 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6617 * 6618 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6619 * applicable. 6620 */ 6621 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6622 6623 /** 6624 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 6625 * @vif: virtual interface 6626 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 6627 * @gfp: allocation flags 6628 * 6629 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 6630 */ 6631 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6632 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 6633 gfp_t gfp); 6634 6635 /** 6636 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 6637 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6638 * @vif: virtual interface 6639 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 6640 * @band: the band to transmit on 6641 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 6642 * 6643 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 6644 */ 6645 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6646 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 6647 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 6648 6649 /** 6650 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 6651 * of injected frames. 6652 * 6653 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 6654 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 6655 * of the skb before calling this function. 6656 * 6657 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 6658 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 6659 */ 6660 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 6661 struct net_device *dev); 6662 6663 /** 6664 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 6665 * 6666 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 6667 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 6668 * 6669 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 6670 * 6671 * private: 6672 * 6673 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 6674 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 6675 */ 6676 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 6677 u32 next_tsf; 6678 bool has_next_tsf; 6679 6680 u8 absent; 6681 6682 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6683 struct { 6684 u32 start; 6685 u32 duration; 6686 u32 interval; 6687 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6688 }; 6689 6690 /** 6691 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 6692 * 6693 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 6694 * @data: NoA tracking data 6695 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6696 * 6697 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 6698 */ 6699 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 6700 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6701 6702 /** 6703 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 6704 * 6705 * @data: NoA tracking data 6706 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6707 */ 6708 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6709 6710 /** 6711 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 6712 * @vif: virtual interface 6713 * @peer: the peer's destination address 6714 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 6715 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 6716 * @gfp: allocation flags 6717 * 6718 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 6719 */ 6720 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 6721 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 6722 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 6723 6724 /** 6725 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 6726 * 6727 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 6728 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 6729 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 6730 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 6731 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 6732 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 6733 * 6734 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 6735 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 6736 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6737 * 6738 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 6739 * @tid: the TID to reserve 6740 * 6741 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 6742 */ 6743 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6744 6745 /** 6746 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 6747 * 6748 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 6749 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 6750 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 6751 * 6752 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 6753 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 6754 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6755 * 6756 * @sta: the station 6757 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 6758 */ 6759 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6760 6761 /** 6762 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6763 * 6764 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6765 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6766 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6767 * 6768 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 6769 * 6770 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 6771 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 6772 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 6773 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 6774 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 6775 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 6776 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 6777 * 6778 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 6779 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 6780 */ 6781 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6782 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6783 6784 /** 6785 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6786 * (in process context) 6787 * 6788 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 6789 * (internally disables bottom halves). 6790 * 6791 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6792 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6793 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6794 */ 6795 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6796 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6797 { 6798 struct sk_buff *skb; 6799 6800 local_bh_disable(); 6801 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 6802 local_bh_enable(); 6803 6804 return skb; 6805 } 6806 6807 /** 6808 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 6809 * 6810 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6811 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 6812 * 6813 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 6814 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 6815 * driver has finished scheduling it. 6816 */ 6817 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6818 6819 /** 6820 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 6821 * 6822 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6823 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 6824 * 6825 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 6826 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 6827 */ 6828 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 6829 6830 /* (deprecated) */ 6831 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 6832 { 6833 } 6834 6835 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6836 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 6837 6838 /** 6839 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 6840 * 6841 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6842 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6843 * 6844 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 6845 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 6846 * 6847 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 6848 * this TXQ internally. 6849 */ 6850 static inline void 6851 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6852 { 6853 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 6854 } 6855 6856 /** 6857 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 6858 * 6859 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6860 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6861 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 6862 * 6863 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 6864 * internally. 6865 */ 6866 static inline void 6867 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6868 bool force) 6869 { 6870 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 6871 } 6872 6873 /** 6874 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 6875 * 6876 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 6877 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 6878 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by 6879 * next_txq(). 6880 * 6881 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 6882 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 6883 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 6884 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 6885 * again. 6886 * 6887 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 6888 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 6889 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 6890 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 6891 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 6892 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 6893 * 6894 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6895 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6896 */ 6897 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6898 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6899 6900 /** 6901 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 6902 * 6903 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 6904 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 6905 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 6906 * 6907 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6908 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 6909 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 6910 */ 6911 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 6912 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 6913 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 6914 6915 /** 6916 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 6917 * 6918 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 6919 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6920 * 6921 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6922 * @inst_id: the local instance id 6923 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 6924 * @gfp: allocation flags 6925 */ 6926 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6927 u8 inst_id, 6928 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 6929 gfp_t gfp); 6930 6931 /** 6932 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 6933 * 6934 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 6935 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 6936 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 6937 * 6938 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6939 * @match: match event information 6940 * @gfp: allocation flags 6941 */ 6942 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6943 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 6944 gfp_t gfp); 6945 6946 /** 6947 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 6948 * 6949 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6950 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 6951 * 6952 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6953 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 6954 * information. 6955 * @len: frame length in bytes 6956 */ 6957 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6958 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 6959 int len); 6960 6961 /** 6962 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 6963 * 6964 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 6965 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 6966 * 6967 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6968 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 6969 * @len: frame length in bytes 6970 */ 6971 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6972 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 6973 int len); 6974 /** 6975 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 6976 * 6977 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 6978 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 6979 * hardware or firmware. 6980 * 6981 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6982 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 6983 */ 6984 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 6985 6986 /** 6987 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 6988 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6989 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6990 * 6991 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 6992 * 6993 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 6994 */ 6995 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6996 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6997 6998 /** 6999 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 7000 * probe response template. 7001 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7002 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7003 * 7004 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7005 * 7006 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 7007 */ 7008 struct sk_buff * 7009 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7010 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7011 7012 /** 7013 * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 7014 * collision. 7015 * 7016 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7017 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 7018 * aware of. 7019 * @gfp: allocation flags 7020 */ 7021 void 7022 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7023 u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp); 7024 7025 /** 7026 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 7027 * 7028 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 7029 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 7030 * 7031 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 7032 */ 7033 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 7034 { 7035 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 7036 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 7037 7038 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 7039 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 7040 } 7041 7042 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 7043